blob: 2c737599bce347989a8b733da3530e30de4af593 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
14#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000015#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
16#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
17#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
18#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000021#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000023#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000025#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000026#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000027#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
28#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
29#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
30#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
34#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000038#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000039#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000040#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000041#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000042#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000043#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
44#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000045#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +000046#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000047#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000048#include <algorithm>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000049#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000050#include <set>
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000051using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000052using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000053
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000054#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
55
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000056// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
57// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
58// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
59// minimum reasonable default.
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000060static cl::opt<unsigned>
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000061PHINodeFoldingThreshold("phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
62 cl::desc("Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000063
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000064static cl::opt<bool>
65DupRet("simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
66 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
67
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000068static cl::opt<bool>
69SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
70 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
71
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +000072static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
73 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
74 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +000075
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +000076STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +000077STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +000078STATISTIC(NumLookupTables, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +000079STATISTIC(NumLookupTablesHoles, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +000080STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000081STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons, "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +000082STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +000083
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +000084namespace {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +000085 // The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
Sanjay Patel9361d352015-09-10 16:31:19 +000086 // case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
87 // cases composing the case group.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +000088 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
89 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
90 // The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
Sanjay Patel9361d352015-09-10 16:31:19 +000091 // and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
92 // switch for that PHI.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +000093 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
94
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +000095 /// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
96 struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
97 ConstantInt *Value;
98 BasicBlock *Dest;
99
100 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
101 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
102
103 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
104 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
105 return Value < RHS.Value;
106 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000107
108 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000109 };
110
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000111class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000112 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000113 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000114 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +0000115 AssumptionCache *AC;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000116 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
117 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000118 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000119 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000120 BasicBlock *Pred,
121 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000122 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
123 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000124
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000125 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000126 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000127 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000128 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000129 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000130 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000131 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <> &Builder);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000132 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <>&Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000133
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000134public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000135 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
136 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC)
137 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), AC(AC) {}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000138 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
139};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000140}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000141
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000142/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000143/// terminator instructions together.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000144static bool SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2) {
145 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000146
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000147 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
148 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
149 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
150 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
151 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Chris Lattnerb7b75142007-04-02 01:44:59 +0000152 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000153
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000154 for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I)
155 if (SI1Succs.count(*I))
156 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin();
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000157 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
158 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
159 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
160 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB))
161 return false;
162 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000163
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000164 return true;
165}
166
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000167/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
168/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
169/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000170static bool isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1,
171 BranchInst *SI2,
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000172 Instruction *Cond,
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000173 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode*> &PhiNodes) {
174 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
175 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
176
177 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000178 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000179 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
180 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
181 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
182 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
183 if (!Ci2) return false;
184 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
185 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
186 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
187 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
188 return false;
189
190 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
191 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
192 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000193 for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I)
194 if (SI1Succs.count(*I))
195 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin();
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000196 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
197 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
198 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000199 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000200 return false;
201 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
202 }
203 return true;
204}
205
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000206/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
207/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
208/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
209/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000210static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
211 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000212 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin())) return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000213
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000214 PHINode *PN;
215 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
216 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
217 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000218}
219
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000220/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
221/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
222/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000223/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000224static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000225 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000226 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000227 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000228 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000229}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000230
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000231/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
232/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000233/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
234/// which works well enough for us.
235///
236/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000237/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
238/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
239/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
240/// set and true is returned.
241///
242/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
243/// Select whose cost is 2.
244///
245/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
246/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
247/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000248static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Craig Topper71b7b682014-08-21 05:55:13 +0000249 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction*> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000250 unsigned &CostRemaining,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000251 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000252 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000253 if (!I) {
254 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
255 // can be executed unconditionally.
256 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
257 if (C->canTrap())
258 return false;
259 return true;
260 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000261 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000262
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000263 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000264 // the bottom of this block.
265 if (PBB == BB) return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000266
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000267 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
268 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000269 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
270 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000271 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000272 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000273
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000274 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
275 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000276 if (!AggressiveInsts) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000277
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000278 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
279 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I)) return true;
280
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000281 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
282 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
283 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000284 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000285 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000286
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000287 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000288
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000289 if (Cost > CostRemaining)
290 return false;
291
292 CostRemaining -= Cost;
293
294 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
295 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000296 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000297 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000298 return false;
299 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
300 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000301 return true;
302}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000303
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000304/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000305/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000306static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000307 // Normal constant int.
308 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000309 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000310 return CI;
311
312 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
313 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000314 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000315
316 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
317 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
318 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
319
320 // IntToPtr const int.
321 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
322 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
323 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
324 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
325 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
326 return CI;
327 else
328 return cast<ConstantInt>
329 (ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
330 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000331 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000332}
333
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000334namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000335
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000336/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
337/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
338/// structure.
339/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
340/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
341/// representing the different cases for the switch.
342/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
343/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
344/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
345/// fail.
346struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000347 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000348 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
349 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
350 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
351 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000352
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000353 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000354 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
355 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
356 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000357 }
358
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000359 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000360 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000361 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000362 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000363
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000364private:
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000365
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000366 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
367 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
368 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
369 if(CompValue && CompValue != NewVal) return false;
370 CompValue = NewVal;
371 return (CompValue != nullptr);
372 }
373
374 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
375 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
376 /// match depending on isEQ).
377 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
378 /// against is placed in CompValue.
379 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
380 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000381 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000382 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
383 ICmpInst *ICI;
384 ConstantInt *C;
385 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
386 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
387 return false;
388 }
389
390 Value *RHSVal;
391 ConstantInt *RHSC;
392
393 // Pattern match a special case
394 // (x & ~2^x) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^x
395 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
396 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ:ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
397 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
398 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) {
399 APInt Not = ~RHSC->getValue();
400 if (Not.isPowerOf2()) {
401 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
402 if(!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
403 return false;
404
405 Vals.push_back(C);
406 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
407 C->getValue() | Not));
408 UsedICmps++;
409 return true;
410 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000411 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000412
413 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
414 if(!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
415 return false;
416
417 UsedICmps++;
418 Vals.push_back(C);
419 return ICI->getOperand(0);
420 }
421
422 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000423 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
424 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000425
426 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
427 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
428 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
429 if(match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) {
430 Span = Span.subtract(RHSC->getValue());
431 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
432 }
433
434 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
435 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
436 // x != 0 && x != 1.
437 if (!isEQ)
438 Span = Span.inverse();
439
440 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
441 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
442 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000443 }
444
445 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000446 if(!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
447 return false;
448
449 // Add all values from the range to the set
450 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
451 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000452
453 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000454 return true;
455
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000456 }
457
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000458 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000459 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
460 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
461 /// vector.
462 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000463 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000464 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
465 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000466
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000467 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
468 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000469
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000470 // Initialize
471 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000472
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000473 while(!DFT.empty()) {
474 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000475
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000476 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
477 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
478 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
479 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
480 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
481 continue;
482 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000483
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000484 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000485 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000486 // Match succeed, continue the loop
487 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000488 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000489
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000490 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
491 // comparison against the same value as the others.
492 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
493 if (!Extra) {
494 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000495 continue;
496 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000497 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
498 CompValue = nullptr;
499 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000500 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000501 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000502};
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000503
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000504}
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000505
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000506static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000507 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000508 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
509 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
510 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
511 if (BI->isConditional())
512 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000513 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
514 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000515 }
516
517 TI->eraseFromParent();
518 if (Cond) RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
519}
520
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000521/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000522/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000523Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000524 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000525 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
526 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
527 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000528 if (SI->getNumSuccessors()*std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
529 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <= 128)
530 CV = SI->getCondition();
531 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000532 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000533 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000534 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000535 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000536 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000537
538 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000539 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000540 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
541 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000542 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000543 CV = Ptr;
544 }
545 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000546 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000547}
548
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000549/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000550/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000551BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000552GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000553 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase>
554 &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000555 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000556 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
557 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e; ++i)
558 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(),
559 i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000560 return SI->getDefaultDest();
561 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000562
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000563 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000564 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000565 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
566 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1),
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000567 DL),
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000568 Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000569 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000570}
571
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000572
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000573/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000574/// in the list that match the specified block.
575static void EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
576 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000577 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000578}
579
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000580/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000581static bool
582ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
583 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase > &C2) {
584 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
585
586 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
587 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
588 std::swap(V1, V2);
589
590 if (V1->size() == 0) return false;
591 if (V1->size() == 1) {
592 // Just scan V2.
593 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
594 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
595 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
596 return true;
597 }
598
599 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
600 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
601 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
602 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
603 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
604 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
605 return true;
606 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
607 ++i1;
608 else
609 ++i2;
610 }
611 return false;
612}
613
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000614/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
615/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
616/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
617/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
618/// very limited form of jump threading.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000619bool SimplifyCFGOpt::
620SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000621 BasicBlock *Pred,
622 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000623 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
624 if (!PredVal) return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
625
626 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
627 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
628 if (ThisVal != PredVal) return false; // Different predicates.
629
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000630 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
631 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
632
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000633 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000634 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000635 BasicBlock *PredDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(),
636 PredCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000637 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000638
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000639 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000640 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000641 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000642 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000643
644 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
645 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
646 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
647 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
648 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
649 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000650 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000651 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000652
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000653 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
654 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
655 // uncond br.
656 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
657 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000658 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000659 (void) NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000660
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000661 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000662 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000663
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000664 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
665 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000666
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000667 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
668 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000669 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000670
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000671 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
672 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000673 SmallPtrSet<Constant*, 16> DeadCases;
674 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
675 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000676
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000677 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000678 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000679
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000680 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
681 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000682 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000683 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
684 if (HasWeight)
685 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
686 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000687 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000688 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
689 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000690 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
691 --i;
692 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000693 if (HasWeight) {
694 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
695 Weights.pop_back();
696 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000697 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
698 SI->removeCase(i);
699 }
700 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000701 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000702 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
703 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
704 createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000705
706 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000707 return true;
708 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000709
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000710 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
711 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000712 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000713 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000714 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
715 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000716 if (TIV)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000717 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
718 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
719 }
720 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000721
722 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
723 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000724 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000725 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
726 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
727 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
728 break;
729 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000730
731 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000732 if (!TheRealDest) TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000733
734 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
735 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000736 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(TIBB), e = succ_end(TIBB); SI != e; ++SI)
737 if (*SI != CheckEdge)
738 (*SI)->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000739 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000740 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000741
742 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000743 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000744 (void) NI;
745
746 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
747 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
748
749 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
750 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000751}
752
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000753namespace {
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000754 /// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000755 /// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
756 /// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
757 struct ConstantIntOrdering {
758 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
759 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
760 }
761 };
762}
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000763
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000764static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
765 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
766 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
767 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000768 if (LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()))
769 return 1;
770 if (LHS->getValue() == RHS->getValue())
771 return 0;
772 return -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000773}
774
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000775static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction* I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000776 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000777 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
778 if (MDString* MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
779 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
780
781 return false;
782}
783
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000784/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
785/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
786/// metadata.
787static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
788 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000789 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000790 assert(MD);
791 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000792 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000793 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000794 }
795
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000796 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
797 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
798 // default weight to be the first entry.
799 if (BranchInst* BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
800 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
801 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
802 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
803 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000804 }
805}
806
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000807/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000808static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000809 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
810 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
811 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
812 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
813 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000814 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000815}
816
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000817/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
818/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000819/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
820/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000821bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
822 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000823 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
824 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
825 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
826 bool Changed = false;
827
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000828 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000829 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000830 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000831
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000832 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
833 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
834 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
835
836 if (PCV == CV && SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI)) {
837 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000838 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000839 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
840
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000841 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000842 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
843
844 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
845 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
846 // build.
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000847 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000848
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000849 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
850 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000851 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
852 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
853
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000854 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000855 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000856 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000857 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
858 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
859 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000860 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
861 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
862 // successor's weights
863 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000864
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000865 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000866 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000867 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000868 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000869 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
870 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
871 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000872 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000873
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000874 if (PredDefault == BB) {
875 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
876 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000877 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
878 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
879 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
880 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
881 else {
882 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
883 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000884
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000885 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
886 // Increase weight for the default case.
887 Weights[0] += Weights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000888 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
889 Weights.pop_back();
890 }
891
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000892 PredCases.pop_back();
893 --i; --e;
894 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000895
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000896 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000897 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
898 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
899 PredDefault = BBDefault;
900 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
901 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000902
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000903 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
904 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000905 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
906 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
907 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
908 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
909 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000910 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
911 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
912 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
913 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
914 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i+1]);
915 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000916 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000917 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000918
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000919 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
920 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
921 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
922 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
923 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
924 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
925 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
926 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000927 } else {
928 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
929 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
930 // activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000931 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000932 std::map<ConstantInt*, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000933 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
934 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
935 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000936
937 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
938 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i+1];
939 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
940 Weights.pop_back();
941 }
942
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000943 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
944 PredCases.pop_back();
945 --i; --e;
946 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000947
948 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
949 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000950 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
951 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
952 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000953 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
954 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000955 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
956 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
957 PTIHandled.erase(BBCases[i].Value);// This constant is taken care of
958 }
959
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000960 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
961 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000962 for (std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering>::iterator I =
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000963 PTIHandled.begin(),
964 E = PTIHandled.end(); I != E; ++I) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +0000965 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
966 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[*I]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000967 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(*I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000968 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000969 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000970 }
971
972 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
973 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
974 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +0000975 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
976 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000977
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000978 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000979 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +0000980 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000981 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000982 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000983 }
984
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000985 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000986 SwitchInst *NewSI = Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault,
987 PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +0000988 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +0000989 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
990 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +0000991
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000992 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
993 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
994 FitWeights(Weights);
995
996 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
997
998 NewSI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
999 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).
1000 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
1001 }
1002
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001003 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001004
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001005 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1006 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1007 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001008 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001009 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1010 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001011 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001012 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001013 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00001014 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
1015 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001016 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001017 }
1018 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1019 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001020
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001021 Changed = true;
1022 }
1023 }
1024 return Changed;
1025}
1026
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001027// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1028// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1029// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001030static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1031 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001032 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001033 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001034 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001035 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1036 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1037 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1038 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V==I1 || BB2V==I2)) {
1039 return false;
1040 }
1041 }
1042 }
1043 return true;
1044}
1045
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001046static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1047
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001048/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1049/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1050/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001051static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001052 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001053 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1054 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1055 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1056 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1057 // identical order.
1058 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1059 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
1060
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001061 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1062 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1063
1064 Instruction *I1 = BB1_Itr++, *I2 = BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001065 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1066 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1067 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1068 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1069 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1070 I1 = BB1_Itr++;
1071 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1072 I2 = BB2_Itr++;
1073 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001074 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001075 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001076 return false;
1077
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001078 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001079
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001080 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001081 do {
1082 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1083 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1084 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1085 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001086
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001087 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1088 return Changed;
1089
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001090 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1091 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1092 // the now redundant second instruction.
1093 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI, BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1094 if (!I2->use_empty())
1095 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Dan Gohmanc8a27f22009-08-25 22:11:20 +00001096 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001097 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {
1098 LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1099 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1100 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
Philip Reamesd92c2a72014-10-22 16:37:13 +00001101 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1102 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001103 };
1104 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001105 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001106 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001107
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001108 I1 = BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001109 I2 = BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001110 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1111 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1112 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1113 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1114 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1115 I1 = BB1_Itr++;
1116 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1117 I2 = BB2_Itr++;
1118 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001119 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001120
1121 return true;
1122
1123HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001124 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1125 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001126 return Changed;
1127
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001128 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001129 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001130 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001131 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1132 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1133 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1134 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1135 continue;
1136
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001137 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1138 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1139 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1140 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
1141 return Changed;
1142
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001143 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001144 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001145 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001146 return Changed;
1147 }
1148 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001149
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001150 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001151 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001152 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI, NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001153 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001154 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1155 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001156 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001157 }
1158
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001159 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001160 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1161 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1162 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1163 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
1164 std::map<std::pair<Value*,Value*>, SelectInst*> InsertedSelects;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001165 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001166 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001167 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001168 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001169 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1170 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001171 if (BB1V == BB2V) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001172
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001173 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1174 // that determines the right value.
1175 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001176 if (!SI)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001177 SI = cast<SelectInst>
1178 (Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1179 BB1V->getName()+"."+BB2V->getName()));
1180
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001181 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1182 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1183 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1184 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001185 }
1186 }
1187
1188 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001189 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI)
1190 AddPredecessorToBlock(*SI, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001191
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001192 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001193 return true;
1194}
1195
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001196/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001197/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1198/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1199/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1200static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1201 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
1202 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI1->getParent();
1203 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1204
1205 // Check that BBEnd has two predecessors and the other predecessor ends with
1206 // an unconditional branch.
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001207 pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BBEnd), PE = pred_end(BBEnd);
1208 BasicBlock *Pred0 = *PI++;
1209 if (PI == PE) // Only one predecessor.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001210 return false;
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001211 BasicBlock *Pred1 = *PI++;
1212 if (PI != PE) // More than two predecessors.
1213 return false;
1214 BasicBlock *BB2 = (Pred0 == BB1) ? Pred1 : Pred0;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001215 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB2->getTerminator());
1216 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isUnconditional())
1217 return false;
1218
1219 // Gather the PHI nodes in BBEnd.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001220 SmallDenseMap<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, PHINode *> JointValueMap;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001221 Instruction *FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001222 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BBEnd->begin(), E = BBEnd->end(); I != E; ++I) {
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001223 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
1224 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001225 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001226 JointValueMap[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)] = PN;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001227 } else {
1228 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I;
1229 break;
1230 }
1231 }
1232 if (!FirstNonPhiInBBEnd)
1233 return false;
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001234
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001235 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1236 // instructions in the two blocks. We scan backward for obviously identical
1237 // instructions in an identical order.
1238 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI1 = BB1->getInstList().rbegin(),
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001239 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend(),
1240 RI2 = BB2->getInstList().rbegin(),
1241 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001242 // Skip debug info.
1243 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1244 if (RI1 == RE1)
1245 return false;
1246 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1247 if (RI2 == RE2)
1248 return false;
1249 // Skip the unconditional branches.
1250 ++RI1;
1251 ++RI2;
1252
1253 bool Changed = false;
1254 while (RI1 != RE1 && RI2 != RE2) {
1255 // Skip debug info.
1256 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1257 if (RI1 == RE1)
1258 return Changed;
1259 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1260 if (RI2 == RE2)
1261 return Changed;
1262
1263 Instruction *I1 = &*RI1, *I2 = &*RI2;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001264 auto InstPair = std::make_pair(I1, I2);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001265 // I1 and I2 should have a single use in the same PHI node, and they
1266 // perform the same operation.
1267 // Cannot move control-flow-involving, volatile loads, vaarg, etc.
1268 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || isa<PHINode>(I2) ||
1269 isa<TerminatorInst>(I1) || isa<TerminatorInst>(I2) ||
David Majnemerba275f92015-08-19 19:54:02 +00001270 I1->isEHPad() || I2->isEHPad() ||
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001271 isa<AllocaInst>(I1) || isa<AllocaInst>(I2) ||
1272 I1->mayHaveSideEffects() || I2->mayHaveSideEffects() ||
1273 I1->mayReadOrWriteMemory() || I2->mayReadOrWriteMemory() ||
1274 !I1->hasOneUse() || !I2->hasOneUse() ||
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001275 !JointValueMap.count(InstPair))
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001276 return Changed;
1277
1278 // Check whether we should swap the operands of ICmpInst.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001279 // TODO: Add support of communativity.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001280 ICmpInst *ICmp1 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I1), *ICmp2 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I2);
1281 bool SwapOpnds = false;
1282 if (ICmp1 && ICmp2 &&
1283 ICmp1->getOperand(0) != ICmp2->getOperand(0) &&
1284 ICmp1->getOperand(1) != ICmp2->getOperand(1) &&
1285 (ICmp1->getOperand(0) == ICmp2->getOperand(1) ||
1286 ICmp1->getOperand(1) == ICmp2->getOperand(0))) {
1287 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1288 SwapOpnds = true;
1289 }
1290 if (!I1->isSameOperationAs(I2)) {
1291 if (SwapOpnds)
1292 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1293 return Changed;
1294 }
1295
1296 // The operands should be either the same or they need to be generated
1297 // with a PHI node after sinking. We only handle the case where there is
1298 // a single pair of different operands.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001299 Value *DifferentOp1 = nullptr, *DifferentOp2 = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001300 unsigned Op1Idx = ~0U;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001301 for (unsigned I = 0, E = I1->getNumOperands(); I != E; ++I) {
1302 if (I1->getOperand(I) == I2->getOperand(I))
1303 continue;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001304 // Early exit if we have more-than one pair of different operands or if
1305 // we need a PHI node to replace a constant.
1306 if (Op1Idx != ~0U ||
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001307 isa<Constant>(I1->getOperand(I)) ||
1308 isa<Constant>(I2->getOperand(I))) {
1309 // If we can't sink the instructions, undo the swapping.
1310 if (SwapOpnds)
1311 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1312 return Changed;
1313 }
1314 DifferentOp1 = I1->getOperand(I);
1315 Op1Idx = I;
1316 DifferentOp2 = I2->getOperand(I);
1317 }
1318
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001319 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK common instructions " << *I1 << "\n");
1320 DEBUG(dbgs() << " " << *I2 << "\n");
1321
1322 // We insert the pair of different operands to JointValueMap and
1323 // remove (I1, I2) from JointValueMap.
1324 if (Op1Idx != ~0U) {
1325 auto &NewPN = JointValueMap[std::make_pair(DifferentOp1, DifferentOp2)];
1326 if (!NewPN) {
1327 NewPN =
1328 PHINode::Create(DifferentOp1->getType(), 2,
1329 DifferentOp1->getName() + ".sink", BBEnd->begin());
1330 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp1, BB1);
1331 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp2, BB2);
1332 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Create PHI node " << *NewPN << "\n";);
1333 }
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001334 // I1 should use NewPN instead of DifferentOp1.
1335 I1->setOperand(Op1Idx, NewPN);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001336 }
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001337 PHINode *OldPN = JointValueMap[InstPair];
1338 JointValueMap.erase(InstPair);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001339
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001340 // We need to update RE1 and RE2 if we are going to sink the first
1341 // instruction in the basic block down.
1342 bool UpdateRE1 = (I1 == BB1->begin()), UpdateRE2 = (I2 == BB2->begin());
1343 // Sink the instruction.
1344 BBEnd->getInstList().splice(FirstNonPhiInBBEnd, BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1345 if (!OldPN->use_empty())
1346 OldPN->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1347 OldPN->eraseFromParent();
1348
1349 if (!I2->use_empty())
1350 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1351 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Philip Reamesd92c2a72014-10-22 16:37:13 +00001352 // TODO: Use combineMetadata here to preserve what metadata we can
1353 // (analogous to the hoisting case above).
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001354 I2->eraseFromParent();
1355
1356 if (UpdateRE1)
1357 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend();
1358 if (UpdateRE2)
1359 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
1360 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = I1;
1361 NumSinkCommons++;
1362 Changed = true;
1363 }
1364 return Changed;
1365}
1366
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001367/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1368/// conditional block.
1369///
1370/// We are looking for code like the following:
1371/// BrBB:
1372/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1373/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1374/// ... // function).
1375/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1376/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1377/// ThenBB:
1378/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1379/// br label EndBB
1380/// EndBB:
1381/// ...
1382/// We are going to transform this into:
1383/// BrBB:
1384/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1385/// ... //
1386/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1387/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1388/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1389/// ...
1390///
1391/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1392/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001393static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1394 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001395 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1396 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001397 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001398
1399 // Volatile or atomic.
1400 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001401 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001402
1403 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1404
1405 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
1406 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 10;
1407 for (BasicBlock::reverse_iterator RI = BrBB->rbegin(),
1408 RE = BrBB->rend(); RI != RE && (--MaxNumInstToLookAt); ++RI) {
1409 Instruction *CurI = &*RI;
1410
1411 // Could be calling an instruction that effects memory like free().
1412 if (CurI->mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001413 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001414
1415 StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(CurI);
1416 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1417 if (SI && SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1418 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1419 return SI->getValueOperand();
1420 else if (SI)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001421 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001422 }
1423
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001424 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001425}
1426
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001427/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001428///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001429/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1430/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1431/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1432/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1433/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1434///
1435/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1436/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1437/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1438/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1439///
1440///
1441/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1442/// \code
1443/// BB:
1444/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1445/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1446/// ThenBB:
1447/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001448/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001449/// EndBB:
1450/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1451/// ...
1452/// \endcode
1453///
1454/// Into this IR:
1455/// \code
1456/// BB:
1457/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1458/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1459/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1460/// ...
1461/// \endcode
1462///
1463/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001464static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001465 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001466 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1467 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1468 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1469 return false;
1470
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001471 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1472 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1473
1474 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1475 // to swap the select operands later.
1476 bool Invert = false;
1477 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1478 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1479 Invert = true;
1480 }
1481 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1482
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001483 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1484 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1485 // - They are defined in BB, and
1486 // - They have no side effects, and
1487 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1488 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1489
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001490 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001491 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1492 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001493 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001494 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001495 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
1496 Instruction *I = BBI;
1497 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001498 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1499 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001500
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001501 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001502 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001503 ++SpeculationCost;
1504 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001505 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001506
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001507 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001508 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1509 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1510 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001511 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001512 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001513 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1514 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001515 return false;
1516
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001517 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1518 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1519 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1520
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001521 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001522 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001523 // being sunk into the use block.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001524 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001525 i != e; ++i) {
1526 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001527 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB ||
1528 OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
1529 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1530
1531 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001532 }
1533 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001534
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001535 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1536 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1537 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
1538 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator I =
1539 SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(), E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
1540 I != E; ++I)
1541 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001542 ++SpeculationCost;
1543 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001544 return false;
1545 }
1546
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001547 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1548 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001549 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001550 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001551 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1552 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001553
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001554 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001555 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001556 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001557 continue;
1558
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001559 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
1560 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
1561 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
1562 return false;
1563
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001564 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001565 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
1566 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
1567 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001568 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
1569
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001570 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
1571 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001572 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001573 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
1574 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001575 unsigned MaxCost = 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold *
1576 TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
1577 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001578 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001579
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00001580 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
1581 // getting expanded into Instructions.
1582 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001583 // constant expression.
1584 ++SpeculationCost;
1585 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001586 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001587 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001588
1589 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
1590 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001591 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001592 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001593
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001594 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001595 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001596
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001597 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
1598 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
1599 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI);
1600 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
1601 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
1602 if (Invert)
1603 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
1604 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() +
1605 "." + FalseV->getName());
1606 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
1607 }
1608
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001609 // Hoist the instructions.
1610 BB->getInstList().splice(BI, ThenBB->getInstList(), ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001611 std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001612
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001613 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001614 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001615 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
1616 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
1617 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
1618 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
1619 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
1620 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
1621
1622 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
1623 if (OrigV == ThenV)
1624 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001625
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001626 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001627 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
1628 // destinations were inverted.
1629 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001630 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001631 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
1632 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV,
1633 TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName());
1634 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
1635 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001636 }
1637
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001638 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001639 return true;
1640}
1641
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001642/// \returns True if this block contains a CallInst with the NoDuplicate
1643/// attribute.
1644static bool HasNoDuplicateCall(const BasicBlock *BB) {
1645 for (BasicBlock::const_iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I) {
1646 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I);
1647 if (!CI)
1648 continue;
1649 if (CI->cannotDuplicate())
1650 return true;
1651 }
1652 return false;
1653}
1654
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001655/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001656static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
1657 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001658 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001659
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00001660 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001661 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
1662 continue;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001663 if (Size > 10) return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001664 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001665
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001666 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001667 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001668 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
1669 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
1670 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI)) return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001671 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001672
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001673 // Looks ok, continue checking.
1674 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001675
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001676 return true;
1677}
1678
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001679/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
1680/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
1681/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001682static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001683 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1684 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00001685 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
1686 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001687 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
1688 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001689
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001690 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
1691 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00001692 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001693 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001694 }
1695
1696 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001697 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001698
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001699 if (HasNoDuplicateCall(BB)) return false;
1700
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001701 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
1702 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001703 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001704 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001705 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1)) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001706
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001707 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
1708 // branch to RealDest.
1709 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
1710 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001711
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001712 if (RealDest == BB) continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001713 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
1714 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator())) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001715
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001716 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
1717 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
1718 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
1719 // the edge we are about to create.
1720 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
1721 RealDest->getName()+".critedge",
1722 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
1723 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001724
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00001725 // Update PHI nodes.
1726 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001727
1728 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
1729 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
1730 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
1731 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
1732 DenseMap<Value*, Value*> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
1733 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
1734 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
1735 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
1736 continue;
1737 }
1738 // Clone the instruction.
1739 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
1740 if (BBI->hasName()) N->setName(BBI->getName()+".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001741
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001742 // Update operands due to translation.
1743 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end();
1744 i != e; ++i) {
1745 DenseMap<Value*, Value*>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
1746 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
1747 *i = PI->second;
1748 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001749
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001750 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001751 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001752 TranslateMap[BBI] = V;
1753 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001754 } else {
1755 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
1756 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
1757 if (!BBI->use_empty())
1758 TranslateMap[BBI] = N;
1759 }
1760 }
1761
1762 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
1763 // to EdgeBB instead.
1764 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
1765 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1766 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
1767 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
1768 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
1769 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001770
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001771 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001772 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001773 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001774
1775 return false;
1776}
1777
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001778/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
1779/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001780static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
1781 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001782 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
1783 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
1784 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
1785 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
1786 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
1787 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001788 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
1789 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
1790 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001791 if (!IfCond ||
1792 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
1793 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
1794 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001795
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00001796 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
1797 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
1798 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
1799 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
1800 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
1801 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
1802 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
1803 if (NumPhis > 2)
1804 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001805
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001806 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
1807 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
1808 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001809 SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00001810 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
1811 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001812 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
1813 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001814
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001815 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
1816 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001817 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001818 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001819 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001820 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001821 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001822
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001823 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001824 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001825 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001826 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001827 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001828 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001829
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00001830 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001831 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
1832 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001833 if (!PN) return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001834
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001835 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
1836 // often be turned into switches and other things.
1837 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
1838 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
1839 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
1840 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
1841 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001842
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001843 // If we all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all
1844 // instructions in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If
1845 // not, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so it's not
1846 // worth promoting to select instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001847 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001848 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
1849 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
1850 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001851 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001852 } else {
1853 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
1854 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Devang Patel2032cad2009-02-03 22:12:02 +00001855 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001856 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
1857 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control
1858 // flow, so the xform is not worth it.
1859 return false;
1860 }
1861 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001862
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001863 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001864 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001865 } else {
1866 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
1867 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Devang Patel2032cad2009-02-03 22:12:02 +00001868 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001869 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
1870 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control
1871 // flow, so the xform is not worth it.
1872 return false;
1873 }
1874 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001875
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00001876 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001877 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001878
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001879 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
1880 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001881 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001882 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001883
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001884 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
1885 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001886 if (IfBlock1)
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001887 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt,
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001888 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001889 IfBlock1->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001890 if (IfBlock2)
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001891 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt,
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001892 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001893 IfBlock2->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001894
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001895 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
1896 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001897 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
1898 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001899
1900 SelectInst *NV =
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001901 cast<SelectInst>(Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, ""));
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001902 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(NV);
1903 NV->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001904 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001905 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001906
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001907 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
1908 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
1909 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
1910 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001911 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
1912 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001913 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001914 return true;
1915}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001916
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001917/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
1918/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001919/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001920static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001921 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001922 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
1923 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
1924 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
1925 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
1926 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001927
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001928 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
1929 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
1930 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001931 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001932 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001933 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001934 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001935
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001936 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001937 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
1938 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
1939 // branch into a return.
1940 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
1941 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
1942 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001943 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001944 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001945 return true;
1946 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001947
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001948 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
1949 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
1950 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
1951 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001952
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001953 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
1954 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
1955 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
1956 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
1957 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
1958 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
1959 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001960
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001961 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
1962 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
1963 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
1964 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
1965 // safe.
1966 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
1967 if (TCV->canTrap())
1968 return false;
1969 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
1970 if (FCV->canTrap())
1971 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001972
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001973 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
1974 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
1975 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
1976 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001977
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001978 // Insert select instructions where needed.
1979 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001980 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001981 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001982 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
1983 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
1984 TrueValue = FalseValue;
1985 } else {
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001986 TrueValue = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue,
1987 FalseValue, "retval");
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001988 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001989 }
1990
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001991 Value *RI = !TrueValue ?
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001992 Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
1993
Daniel Dunbar5e0a58b2009-08-23 10:29:55 +00001994 (void) RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001995
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00001996 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00001997 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
1998 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: "<< *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001999
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002000 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2001
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002002 return true;
2003}
2004
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002005/// Given a conditional BranchInstruction, retrieve the probabilities of the
2006/// branch taking each edge. Fills in the two APInt parameters and returns true,
2007/// or returns false if no or invalid metadata was found.
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002008static bool ExtractBranchMetadata(BranchInst *BI,
2009 uint64_t &ProbTrue, uint64_t &ProbFalse) {
2010 assert(BI->isConditional() &&
2011 "Looking for probabilities on unconditional branch?");
2012 MDNode *ProfileData = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
2013 if (!ProfileData || ProfileData->getNumOperands() != 3) return false;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +00002014 ConstantInt *CITrue =
2015 mdconst::dyn_extract<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(1));
2016 ConstantInt *CIFalse =
2017 mdconst::dyn_extract<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(2));
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002018 if (!CITrue || !CIFalse) return false;
2019 ProbTrue = CITrue->getValue().getZExtValue();
2020 ProbFalse = CIFalse->getValue().getZExtValue();
2021 return true;
2022}
2023
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002024/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002025/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002026static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002027 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2028 return false;
2029 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = PB->begin(), E = PB->end(); I != E; I++) {
2030 Instruction *PBI = &*I;
2031 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2032 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2033 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2034 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2035 return true;
2036 }
2037 }
2038 return false;
2039}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002040
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002041/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2042/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2043/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002044bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002045 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002046
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002047 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002048 if (BI->isConditional())
2049 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2050 else {
2051 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2052 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2053 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2054 // predecessor.
2055 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2056 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2057 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2058 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2059 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
2060 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end();
2061 I != E; ) {
2062 Instruction *Curr = I++;
2063 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2064 Cond = Curr;
2065 break;
2066 }
2067 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2068 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2069 return false;
2070 }
2071 }
2072
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002073 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002074 return false;
2075 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002076
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002077 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2078 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002079 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002080
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002081 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
2082 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = Cond; ++CondIt;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002083
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002084 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002085 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt)) ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002086
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002087 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002088 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002089
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002090 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2091 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2092 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2093 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2094 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2095 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
2096 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != I; ++I) {
2097 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2098 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2099 continue;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002100 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002101 return false;
2102 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2103 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2104 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2105 return false;
2106 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2107 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2108 // and Cond.
2109 ++NumBonusInsts;
2110 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2111 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2112 return false;
2113 }
2114
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002115 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2116 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2117 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2118 if (CE->canTrap())
2119 return false;
2120 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2121 if (CE->canTrap())
2122 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002123
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002124 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
2125 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002126 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002127 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2128 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002129
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002130 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2131 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002132 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002133
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002134 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2135 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2136 // blocks.
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002137 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002138 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002139 (BI->isConditional() &&
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002140 !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
2141 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2142 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002143 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002144
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002145 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002146 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002147 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002148
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002149 if (BI->isConditional()) {
2150 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest)
2151 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2152 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest)
2153 Opc = Instruction::And;
2154 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest)
2155 Opc = Instruction::And, InvertPredCond = true;
2156 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest)
2157 Opc = Instruction::Or, InvertPredCond = true;
2158 else
2159 continue;
2160 } else {
2161 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2162 continue;
2163 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002164
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002165 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002166 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002167
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002168 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2169 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002170 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002171
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002172 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2173 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2174 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2175 } else {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002176 NewCond = Builder.CreateNot(NewCond,
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002177 PBI->getCondition()->getName()+".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002178 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002179
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002180 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002181 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002182 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002183
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002184 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002185 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002186 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2187 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2188 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002189 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002190 // instructions.
2191 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
2192 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2193 continue;
2194 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2195 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
2196 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingEntries);
2197 VMap[BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002198
2199 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2200 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2201 // only given the branch precondition.
2202 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2203 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002204 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002205
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002206 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI, NewBonusInst);
2207 NewBonusInst->takeName(BonusInst);
2208 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002209 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002210
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002211 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2212 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002213 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002214 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
2215 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingEntries);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002216 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI, New);
2217 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002218 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002219
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002220 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002221 Instruction *NewCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002222 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(),
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002223 New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002224 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2225
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002226 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002227 bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight,
2228 PredFalseWeight);
2229 bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight,
2230 SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002231 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2232
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002233 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002234 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2235 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2236 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2237 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2238 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2239 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2240 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2241 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2242 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
2243 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2244 SuccTrueWeight) + PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2245 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002246 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2247 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2248 }
2249 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002250 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2251 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2252 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2253 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2254 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2255 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2256 SuccTrueWeight) + PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2257 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2258 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2259 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002260 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2261 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2262 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002263 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2264 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2265 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2266
2267 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),NewWeights.end());
2268 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2269 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).
2270 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2271 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002272 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002273 } else {
2274 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2275 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002276 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002277 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
2278 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002279 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002280 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2281 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2282 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2283 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
2284 Instruction *NotCond =
2285 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2286 "not.cond"));
2287 MergedCond =
2288 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2289 NotCond, New,
2290 "and.cond"));
2291 if (PBI_C->isOne())
2292 MergedCond =
2293 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2294 PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond,
2295 "or.cond"));
2296 } else {
2297 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2298 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2299 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002300 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002301 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2302 PBI->getCondition(), New,
2303 "and.cond"));
2304 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
2305 Instruction *NotCond =
2306 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2307 "not.cond"));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002308 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002309 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2310 NotCond, MergedCond,
2311 "or.cond"));
2312 }
2313 }
2314 // Update PHI Node.
2315 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2316 MergedCond);
2317 }
2318 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2319 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2320 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2321 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002322 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002323
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002324 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2325 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2326
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002327 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
2328 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I)
2329 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(*I))
2330 I->clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002331
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002332 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002333 }
2334 return false;
2335}
2336
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002337/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
2338/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002339/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
2340/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
2341static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI) {
2342 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
2343 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00002344
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002345 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002346 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002347 // this conditional branch redundant.
2348 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2349 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2350 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
2351 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
2352 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2353 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2354 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002355 BI->setCondition(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002356 CondIsTrue));
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002357 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
2358 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002359
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002360 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
2361 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
2362 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
2363 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002364 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002365 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Jay Foad52131342011-03-30 11:28:46 +00002366 std::distance(PB, PE),
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002367 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr",
2368 BB->begin());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00002369 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
2370 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
2371 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002372 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002373 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
2374 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002375 PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional() &&
2376 PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2377 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2378 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002379 NewPN->addIncoming(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002380 CondIsTrue), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002381 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002382 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002383 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002384 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002385
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002386 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002387 return true;
2388 }
2389 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002390
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002391 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002392 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002393 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00002394 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
2395 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2396 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2397 ++BBI;
2398 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002399 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002400
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002401
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002402 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
2403 if (CE->canTrap())
2404 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002405
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002406 int PBIOp, BIOp;
2407 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
2408 PBIOp = BIOp = 0;
2409 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
2410 PBIOp = 0, BIOp = 1;
2411 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
2412 PBIOp = 1, BIOp = 0;
2413 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
2414 PBIOp = BIOp = 1;
2415 else
2416 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002417
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002418 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
2419 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
2420 // keep getting unwound.
2421 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
2422 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002423
2424 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002425 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
2426 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002427
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002428 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
2429 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
2430 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
2431
2432 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002433 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2434 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002435 isa<PHINode>(II); ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002436 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
2437 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002438
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002439 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
2440 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2441 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
2442 if (CE->canTrap())
2443 return false;
2444
2445 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2446 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2447 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
2448 if (CE->canTrap())
2449 return false;
2450 }
2451
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002452 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002453 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002454
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002455 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002456 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002457
2458
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002459 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
2460 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
2461 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
2462 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
2463 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
2464 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
2465 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
2466 if (OtherDest == BB) {
2467 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
2468 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002469 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
2470 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002471 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
2472 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002473 }
2474
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002475 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002476
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002477 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
2478 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002479
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002480 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
2481 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002482 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002483 if (PBIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002484 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName()+".not");
2485
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002486 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
2487 if (BIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002488 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName()+".not");
2489
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002490 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002491 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002492
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002493 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
2494 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
2495 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
2496 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002497
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002498 // Update branch weight for PBI.
2499 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002500 bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight,
2501 PredFalseWeight);
2502 bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight,
2503 SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002504 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2505 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
2506 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ?PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
2507 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
2508 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
2509 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
2510 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
2511 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00002512 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
2513 PredOther * SuccCommon,
2514 PredOther * SuccOther};
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002515 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2516 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2517
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002518 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00002519 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
2520 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002521 }
2522
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002523 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
2524 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002525 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002526
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002527 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
2528 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
2529 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
2530 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002531 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002532 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
2533 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
2534 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2535 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2536 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2537 if (BIV != PBIV) {
2538 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002539 Value *NV = cast<SelectInst>
2540 (Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName()+".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002541 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002542 }
2543 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002544
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002545 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
2546 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002547
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002548 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
2549 // one fewer predecessor.
2550 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002551}
2552
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002553// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
2554// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002555// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
2556// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
2557// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
2558static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002559 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
2560 uint32_t TrueWeight,
2561 uint32_t FalseWeight){
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002562 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
2563 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
2564 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
2565 // successor.
2566 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002567 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002568
2569 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00002570 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002571 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
2572 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002573 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002574 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002575 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002576 else
2577 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent());
2578 }
2579
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002580 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
2581 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
2582
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002583 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002584 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002585 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
2586 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
2587 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002588 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002589 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002590 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
2591 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002592 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
2593 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
2594 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2595 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext()).
2596 createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
2597 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002598 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
2599 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
2600 // terminator must be unreachable.
2601 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
2602 } else {
2603 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
2604 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
2605 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002606 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002607 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002608 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002609 else
2610 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002611 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002612 }
2613
2614 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
2615 return true;
2616}
2617
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002618// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002619// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
2620// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
2621// unconditional otherwise.
2622static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
2623 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
2624 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
2625 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
2626 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
2627 return false;
2628
2629 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
2630 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00002631 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
2632 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002633
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002634 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
2635 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
2636 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
2637 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
2638 if (HasWeights) {
2639 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
2640 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
2641 TrueWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).
2642 getSuccessorIndex()];
2643 FalseWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).
2644 getSuccessorIndex()];
2645 }
2646 }
2647
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002648 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002649 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB,
2650 TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002651}
2652
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002653// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00002654// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
2655// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
2656// with
2657// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
2658static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
2659 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
2660 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
2661 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
2662 if (!TBA || !FBA)
2663 return false;
2664
2665 // Extract the actual blocks.
2666 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
2667 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
2668
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002669 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002670 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB,
2671 0, 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00002672}
2673
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002674/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
2675/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002676/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
2677/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
2678/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
2679/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
2680/// like:
2681///
2682/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
2683/// DEFAULT:
2684/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
2685/// br label %end
2686/// end:
2687/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002688///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002689/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
2690/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00002691static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002692 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
2693 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
2694 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002695 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00002696
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002697 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
2698 // complex.
2699 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse()) return false;
2700
2701 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
2702 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002703
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002704 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
2705 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
2706 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
2707 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002708 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator())) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002709
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002710 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
2711 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
2712 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002713
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002714 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
2715 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
2716 // away.
2717 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
2718 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
2719 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
2720 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002721
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002722 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002723 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002724 ICI->eraseFromParent();
2725 }
2726 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002727 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002728 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002729
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002730 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
2731 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
2732 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00002733 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002734 Value *V;
2735 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
2736 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
2737 else
2738 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002739
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002740 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
2741 ICI->eraseFromParent();
2742 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002743 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002744 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002745
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002746 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
2747 // the block.
2748 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002749 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002750 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002751 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
2752 return false;
2753
2754 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
2755 // true in the PHI.
2756 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
2757 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
2758
2759 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
2760 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
2761
2762 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
2763 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
2764 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
2765 ICI->eraseFromParent();
2766
2767 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
2768 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
2769 BasicBlock *NewBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge",
2770 BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00002771 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
2772 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
2773 if (HasWeights) {
2774 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
2775 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
2776 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
2777 Weights[0] = (Weights[0]+1) >> 1;
2778 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
2779
2780 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
2781 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2782 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).
2783 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2784 }
2785 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002786 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002787
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002788 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00002789 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
2790 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
2791 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002792 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
2793 return true;
2794}
2795
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002796/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002797/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
2798/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002799static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
2800 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002801 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002802 if (!Cond) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002803
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002804 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
2805 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
2806 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002807
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00002808 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00002809 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
2810 // Unpack the result
2811 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt*> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
2812 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
2813 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
2814 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002815
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002816 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002817 if (!CompVal) return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002818
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00002819 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
2820 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
2821 return false;
2822
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00002823 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
2824
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002825 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
2826 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
2827 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
2828 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002829
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002830 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00002831 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002832 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002833
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00002834 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
2835 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
2836
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002837 // Figure out which block is which destination.
2838 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2839 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2840 if (!TrueWhenEqual) std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002841
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002842 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002843
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002844 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002845 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n" << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002846
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002847 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
2848 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
2849 // right before the condbr to handle it.
2850 if (ExtraCase) {
2851 BasicBlock *NewBB = BB->splitBasicBlock(BI, "switch.early.test");
2852 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
2853 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002854 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2855
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002856 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002857 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002858 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002859 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002860
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002861 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002862
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00002863 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
2864 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002865 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002866
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002867 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
2868 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002869 BB = NewBB;
2870 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002871
2872 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002873 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
2874 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002875 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
2876 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002877 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002878
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002879 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002880 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00002881
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002882 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
2883 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
2884 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002885
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002886 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
2887 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
2888 // the number of edges added.
2889 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin();
2890 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
2891 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
2892 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2893 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size()-1; i != e; ++i)
2894 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
2895 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002896
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002897 // Erase the old branch instruction.
2898 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002899
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002900 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002901 return true;
2902}
2903
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00002904// FIXME: This seems like a pretty common thing to want to do. Consider
2905// whether there is a more accessible place to put this.
2906static void convertInvokeToCall(InvokeInst *II) {
2907 SmallVector<Value*, 8> Args(II->op_begin(), II->op_end() - 3);
2908 // Insert a call instruction before the invoke.
2909 CallInst *Call = CallInst::Create(II->getCalledValue(), Args, "", II);
2910 Call->takeName(II);
2911 Call->setCallingConv(II->getCallingConv());
2912 Call->setAttributes(II->getAttributes());
2913 Call->setDebugLoc(II->getDebugLoc());
2914
2915 // Anything that used the value produced by the invoke instruction now uses
2916 // the value produced by the call instruction. Note that we do this even
2917 // for void functions and calls with no uses so that the callgraph edge is
2918 // updated.
2919 II->replaceAllUsesWith(Call);
2920 II->getUnwindDest()->removePredecessor(II->getParent());
2921
2922 // Insert a branch to the normal destination right before the invoke.
2923 BranchInst::Create(II->getNormalDest(), II);
2924
2925 // Finally, delete the invoke instruction!
2926 II->eraseFromParent();
2927}
2928
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002929bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
2930 // If this is a trivial landing pad that just continues unwinding the caught
2931 // exception then zap the landing pad, turning its invokes into calls.
2932 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
2933 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
2934 if (RI->getValue() != LPInst)
2935 // Not a landing pad, or the resume is not unwinding the exception that
2936 // caused control to branch here.
2937 return false;
2938
2939 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
2940 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst, E = RI;
2941 while (++I != E)
2942 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2943 return false;
2944
2945 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002946 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
2947 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>((*PI++)->getTerminator());
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00002948 convertInvokeToCall(II);
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002949 }
2950
Reid Klecknerf12b3342015-01-22 19:29:46 +00002951 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
2952 BB->eraseFromParent();
2953 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002954}
2955
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00002956bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
2957 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
2958 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
2959 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
2960 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
2961 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
2962 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
2963 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
2964 // simplified.
2965 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
2966 Instruction *CPInst = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
2967 if (!CPInst)
2968 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
2969 return false;
2970
2971 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
2972 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst, E = RI;
2973 while (++I != E)
2974 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2975 return false;
2976
2977 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this
2978 // will set UnwindDest to nullptr.
2979 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
2980
2981 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
2982 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
2983 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
2984 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
2985 // are both EH pads).
2986 if (UnwindDest) {
2987 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
2988 // reference the block we are removing
2989 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
2990 IE = UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI();
2991 I != IE; ++I) {
2992 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
2993
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00002994 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00002995 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00002996 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00002997 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
2998 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
2999 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3000 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3001 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3002 // pad being removed.
3003 //
3004 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3005 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3006 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3007 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3008 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3009 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3010
3011 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3012 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3013
3014 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3015 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3016 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3017 // DestPN.
3018 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
3019 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
3020 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3021 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3022 }
3023 } else {
3024 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3025 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3026 // predecessors with this value.
3027 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3028 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3029 }
3030 }
3031 }
3032
3033 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
3034 Instruction *InsertPt = UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI();
3035 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI();
3036 I != IE;) {
3037 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3038 // being moved to another block.
3039 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3040 if (PN->use_empty())
3041 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3042 // when we erase BB below.
3043 continue;
3044
3045 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3046 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3047 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3048 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3049 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3050 if (pred != BB)
3051 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3052 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3053 }
3054 }
3055
3056 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3057 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3058 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
3059 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
3060 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
3061 if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
3062 // The cleanup return being simplified continues to the caller and this
3063 // predecessor terminated with an invoke instruction. Convert the
3064 // invoke to a call.
3065 // This call updates the predecessor/successor chain.
3066 convertInvokeToCall(II);
3067 } else {
3068 // In the remaining cases the predecessor's terminator unwinds to the
3069 // block we are removing. We need to create a new instruction that
3070 // unwinds to the caller. Simply setting the unwind destination to
3071 // nullptr would leave the objects internal data in an inconsistent
3072 // state.
3073 // FIXME: Consider whether it is better to update setUnwindDest to
3074 // keep things consistent.
3075 if (auto *CRI = dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
3076 auto *NewCRI = CleanupReturnInst::Create(CRI->getCleanupPad(),
3077 nullptr, CRI);
3078 NewCRI->takeName(CRI);
3079 NewCRI->setDebugLoc(CRI->getDebugLoc());
3080 CRI->eraseFromParent();
3081 } else if (auto *CEP = dyn_cast<CatchEndPadInst>(TI)) {
3082 auto *NewCEP = CatchEndPadInst::Create(CEP->getContext(), nullptr,
3083 CEP);
3084 NewCEP->takeName(CEP);
3085 NewCEP->setDebugLoc(CEP->getDebugLoc());
3086 CEP->eraseFromParent();
3087 } else if (auto *TPI = dyn_cast<TerminatePadInst>(TI)) {
3088 SmallVector<Value *, 3> TerminatePadArgs;
3089 for (Value *Operand : TPI->arg_operands())
3090 TerminatePadArgs.push_back(Operand);
3091 auto *NewTPI = TerminatePadInst::Create(TPI->getContext(), nullptr,
3092 TerminatePadArgs, TPI);
3093 NewTPI->takeName(TPI);
3094 NewTPI->setDebugLoc(TPI->getDebugLoc());
3095 TPI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003096 } else {
3097 llvm_unreachable("Unexpected predecessor to cleanup pad.");
3098 }
3099 }
3100 } else {
3101 // If the predecessor did not terminate with an invoke instruction, it
3102 // must be some variety of EH pad.
3103 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
3104 // FIXME: Introducing an EH terminator base class would simplify this.
3105 if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI))
3106 II->setUnwindDest(UnwindDest);
3107 else if (auto *CRI = dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(TI))
3108 CRI->setUnwindDest(UnwindDest);
3109 else if (auto *CEP = dyn_cast<CatchEndPadInst>(TI))
3110 CEP->setUnwindDest(UnwindDest);
3111 else if (auto *TPI = dyn_cast<TerminatePadInst>(TI))
3112 TPI->setUnwindDest(UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003113 else
3114 llvm_unreachable("Unexpected predecessor to cleanup pad.");
3115 }
3116 }
3117
3118 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3119 BB->eraseFromParent();
3120 return true;
3121}
3122
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003123bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003124 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3125 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator()) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003126
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003127 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
3128 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
3129 SmallVector<BranchInst*, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00003130 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
3131 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003132 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
3133 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
3134 if (BI->isUnconditional())
3135 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
3136 else
3137 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
3138 }
3139 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003140
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003141 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003142 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003143 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3144 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
3145 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
3146 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003147 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003148 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003149
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003150 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Ramkumar Ramachandra40c3e032015-01-13 03:46:47 +00003151 if (pred_empty(BB))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003152 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3153 BB->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003154
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003155 return true;
3156 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003157
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003158 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
3159 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
3160 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
3161 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3162 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003163
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003164 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
3165 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
3166 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003167 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003168 return true;
3169 }
3170 return false;
3171}
3172
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003173bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
3174 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003175
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003176 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003177
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003178 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
3179 // be removed, do so.
3180 while (UI != BB->begin()) {
3181 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI;
3182 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003183 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
3184 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
3185 // operations may have this effect.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003186 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003187
3188 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
3189 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
3190 if (SI->isVolatile())
3191 break;
3192 } else if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
3193 if (LI->isVolatile())
3194 break;
3195 } else if (AtomicRMWInst *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
3196 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
3197 break;
3198 } else if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
3199 if (CXI->isVolatile())
3200 break;
3201 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
3202 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003203 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003204 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00003205 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
3206 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
3207 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
3208 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003209 }
3210
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00003211 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
3212 if (!BBI->use_empty())
3213 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003214 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003215 Changed = true;
3216 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003217
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003218 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
3219 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
3220 if (&BB->front() != UI) return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003221
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003222 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
3223 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3224 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003225 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003226 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
3227 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
3228 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
3229 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3230 TI->eraseFromParent();
3231 Changed = true;
3232 }
3233 } else {
3234 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003235 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003236 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3237 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003238 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003239 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3240 Changed = true;
3241 }
3242 }
3243 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003244 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003245 i != e; ++i)
3246 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003247 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
3248 SI->removeCase(i);
3249 --i; --e;
3250 Changed = true;
3251 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003252 } else if (InvokeInst *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
3253 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3254 // Convert the invoke to a call instruction. This would be a good
3255 // place to note that the call does not throw though.
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003256 BranchInst *BI = Builder.CreateBr(II->getNormalDest());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003257 II->removeFromParent(); // Take out of symbol table
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003258
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003259 // Insert the call now...
3260 SmallVector<Value*, 8> Args(II->op_begin(), II->op_end()-3);
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003261 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
3262 CallInst *CI = Builder.CreateCall(II->getCalledValue(),
Jay Foad5bd375a2011-07-15 08:37:34 +00003263 Args, II->getName());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003264 CI->setCallingConv(II->getCallingConv());
3265 CI->setAttributes(II->getAttributes());
3266 // If the invoke produced a value, the call does now instead.
3267 II->replaceAllUsesWith(CI);
3268 delete II;
3269 Changed = true;
3270 }
3271 }
3272 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003273
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003274 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Ramkumar Ramachandra40c3e032015-01-13 03:46:47 +00003275 if (pred_empty(BB) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003276 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
3277 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3278 BB->eraseFromParent();
3279 return true;
3280 }
3281
3282 return Changed;
3283}
3284
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003285static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
3286 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
3287
3288 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3289 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3290 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
3291 return false;
3292 }
3293 return true;
3294}
3295
3296/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
3297/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003298static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003299 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003300
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003301 bool HasDefault =
3302 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003303
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003304 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
3305 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
3306 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
3307 SmallVector <ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
3308 SmallVector <ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
3309
3310 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
3311 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
3312 if (!DestA) DestA = Dest;
3313 if (Dest == DestA) {
3314 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3315 continue;
3316 }
3317 if (!DestB) DestB = Dest;
3318 if (Dest == DestB) {
3319 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3320 continue;
3321 }
3322 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003323 }
3324
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003325 assert(DestA && DestB && "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
3326 assert(DestA != DestB);
3327 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
3328 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
3329 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
3330
3331 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
3332 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
3333 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
3334 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
3335 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
3336 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
3337 ContiguousDest = DestA;
3338 OtherDest = DestB;
3339 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
3340 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
3341 ContiguousDest = DestB;
3342 OtherDest = DestA;
3343 } else
3344 return false;
3345
3346 // Start building the compare and branch.
3347
3348 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
3349 Constant *NumCases = ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003350
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003351 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
3352 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003353 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
3354
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003355 Value *Cmp;
3356 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003357 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003358 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
3359 else
3360 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003361 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003362
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003363 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003364 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
3365 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003366 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3367 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003368 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
3369 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
3370 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3371 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
3372 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
3373 else
3374 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
3375 }
3376 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
3377 TrueWeight /= 2;
3378 FalseWeight /= 2;
3379 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003380 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003381 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(
3382 (uint32_t)TrueWeight, (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003383 }
3384 }
3385
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003386 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
3387 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3388 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
3389 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest()) ++PreviousEdges;
3390 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003391 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3392 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003393 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3394 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
3395 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest()) ++PreviousEdges;
3396 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
3397 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3398 }
3399
3400 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003401 SI->eraseFromParent();
3402
3403 return true;
3404}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003405
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003406/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003407/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003408static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
3409 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003410 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00003411 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003412 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00003413 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003414
3415 // Gather dead cases.
3416 SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 8> DeadCases;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003417 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003418 if ((I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownZero) != 0 ||
3419 (I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownOne) != KnownOne) {
3420 DeadCases.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003421 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case '"
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003422 << I.getCaseValue() << "' is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003423 }
3424 }
3425
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003426 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00003427 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
3428 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
3429 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003430 bool HasDefault =
3431 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00003432 const unsigned NumUnknownBits = Bits -
3433 (KnownZero.Or(KnownOne)).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00003434 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00003435 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
3436 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
3437 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003438 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
3439 BasicBlock *NewDefault = SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(),
3440 SI->getParent(), "");
3441 SI->setDefaultDest(NewDefault);
3442 SplitBlock(NewDefault, NewDefault->begin());
3443 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
3444 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
3445 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
3446 return true;
3447 }
3448
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003449 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3450 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3451 if (HasWeight) {
3452 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3453 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
3454 }
3455
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003456 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
3457 for (unsigned I = 0, E = DeadCases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003458 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCases[I]);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003459 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003460 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003461 if (HasWeight) {
3462 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
3463 Weights.pop_back();
3464 }
3465
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003466 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003467 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003468 SI->removeCase(Case);
3469 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00003470 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003471 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
3472 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3473 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
3474 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
3475 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003476
3477 return !DeadCases.empty();
3478}
3479
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003480/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
3481/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003482/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
3483/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
3484/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
3485static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
3486 BasicBlock *BB,
3487 int *PhiIndex) {
3488 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003489 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003490 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003491 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003492
3493 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
3494 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003495 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003496
3497 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
3498
3499 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
3500 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
3501 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
3502 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
3503
3504 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3505 if (InValue != CaseValue) continue;
3506
3507 *PhiIndex = Idx;
3508 return PHI;
3509 }
3510
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003511 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003512}
3513
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003514/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
3515/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
3516/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003517/// Returns true if a change is made.
3518static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
3519 typedef DenseMap<PHINode*, SmallVector<int,4> > ForwardingNodesMap;
3520 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
3521
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003522 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003523 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
3524 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003525
3526 int PhiIndex;
3527 PHINode *PHI = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest,
3528 &PhiIndex);
3529 if (!PHI) continue;
3530
3531 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
3532 }
3533
3534 bool Changed = false;
3535
3536 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
3537 E = ForwardingNodes.end(); I != E; ++I) {
3538 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003539 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003540
3541 if (Indexes.size() < 2) continue;
3542
3543 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
3544 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
3545 Changed = true;
3546 }
3547
3548 return Changed;
3549}
3550
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003551/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003552/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Hans Wennborg08238ad2012-09-07 08:22:57 +00003553static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00003554 if (C->isThreadDependent())
3555 return false;
3556 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
3557 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003558
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00003559 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C))
3560 return CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing();
3561
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003562 return isa<ConstantFP>(C) ||
3563 isa<ConstantInt>(C) ||
3564 isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) ||
3565 isa<GlobalValue>(C) ||
3566 isa<UndefValue>(C);
3567}
3568
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003569/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003570/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003571static Constant *LookupConstant(Value *V,
3572 const SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*>& ConstantPool) {
3573 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
3574 return C;
3575 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
3576}
3577
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003578/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003579/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
3580/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003581/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003582static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003583ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
3584 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003585 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003586 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
3587 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003588 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003589 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
3590 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
3591 if (A->isNullValue())
3592 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003593 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003594 }
3595
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003596 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
3597 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
3598 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
3599 COps.push_back(A);
3600 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003601 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003602 }
3603
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003604 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003605 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
3606 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003607 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003608
3609 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I->getOpcode(), I->getType(), COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003610}
3611
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003612/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003613/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003614/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003615/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003616static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003617GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003618 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003619 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
3620 const DataLayout &DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003621 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
3622 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
3623
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003624 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
3625 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
3626 SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*> ConstantPool;
3627 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
3628 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
3629 ++I) {
3630 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
3631 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
3632 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1)
3633 return false;
3634 Pred = CaseDest;
3635 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
3636 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3637 // Skip debug intrinsic.
3638 continue;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003639 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003640 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00003641
3642 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
3643 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
3644 // no longer dominate all its uses.
3645 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
3646 User *User = Use.getUser();
3647 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
3648 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
3649 continue;
3650 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
3651 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
3652 continue;
3653 return false;
3654 }
3655
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003656 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(I, C));
3657 } else {
3658 break;
3659 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003660 }
3661
3662 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
3663 if (!*CommonDest)
3664 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
3665 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
3666 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
3667 return false;
3668
3669 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
3670 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
3671 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
3672 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
3673 if (Idx == -1)
3674 continue;
3675
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003676 Constant *ConstVal = LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx),
3677 ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003678 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003679 return false;
3680
3681 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
3682 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal))
3683 return false;
3684
3685 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
3686 }
3687
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003688 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003689}
3690
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003691// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
3692// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003693static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
3694 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
3695 Constant *Result) {
3696 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
3697 if (I.first == Result) {
3698 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
3699 return;
3700 }
3701 }
3702 UniqueResults.push_back(std::make_pair(Result,
3703 SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
3704}
3705
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003706// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003707// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
3708// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
3709// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003710static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
3711 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
3712 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
3713 Constant *&DefaultResult,
3714 const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003715 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
3716 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
3717
3718 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
3719 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
3720 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
3721 DL))
3722 return false;
3723
3724 // Only one value per case is permitted
3725 if (Results.size() > 1)
3726 return false;
3727 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
3728
3729 // Check the PHI consistency.
3730 if (!PHI)
3731 PHI = Results[0].first;
3732 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
3733 return false;
3734 }
3735 // Find the default result value.
3736 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
3737 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
3738 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
3739 DL);
3740 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
3741 // is unreachable.
3742 DefaultResult =
3743 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
3744 if ((!DefaultResult &&
3745 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
3746 return false;
3747
3748 return true;
3749}
3750
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003751// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
3752// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003753// Example:
3754// switch (a) {
3755// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
3756// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
3757// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
3758// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
3759// default:
3760// return 4;
3761// }
3762static Value *
3763ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
3764 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
3765 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
3766 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
3767 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
3768 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
3769 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
3770 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
3771 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
3772 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
3773 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
3774
3775 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
3776 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
3777 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
3778 Value *const ValueCompare =
3779 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
3780 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
3781 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
3782 }
3783 Value *const ValueCompare =
3784 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
3785 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first, SelectValue,
3786 "switch.select");
3787 }
3788
3789 return nullptr;
3790}
3791
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003792// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
3793// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003794static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
3795 Value *SelectValue,
3796 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
3797 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
3798 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
3799 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
3800 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
3801
3802 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
3803
3804 // Remove the switch.
3805 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
3806 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
3807
3808 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
3809 continue;
3810 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
3811 }
3812 SI->eraseFromParent();
3813}
3814
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003815/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003816/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
3817/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
3818static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003819 AssumptionCache *AC, const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003820 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
3821 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
3822 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
3823 Constant *DefaultResult;
3824 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
3825 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003826 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
3827 DL))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003828 return false;
3829 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
3830 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
3831 return false;
3832 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
3833
3834 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
3835 Value *SelectValue = ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(
3836 UniqueResults,
3837 DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
3838 if (SelectValue) {
3839 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
3840 return true;
3841 }
3842 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
3843 return false;
3844}
3845
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003846namespace {
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003847 /// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003848 class SwitchLookupTable {
3849 public:
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003850 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
3851 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003852 SwitchLookupTable(
3853 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
3854 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
3855 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003856
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003857 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003858 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00003859 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003860
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003861 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003862 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003863 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00003864 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003865
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003866 private:
3867 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
3868 // different ways.
3869 enum {
3870 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
3871 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
3872 SingleValueKind,
3873
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00003874 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
3875 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
3876 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
3877 LinearMapKind,
3878
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003879 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
3880 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
3881 // shift and mask operations.
3882 BitMapKind,
3883
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003884 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
3885 // instructions from the table.
3886 ArrayKind
3887 } Kind;
3888
3889 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
3890 Constant *SingleValue;
3891
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003892 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
3893 ConstantInt *BitMap;
3894 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
3895
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00003896 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
3897 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
3898 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
3899
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003900 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
3901 GlobalVariable *Array;
3902 };
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +00003903}
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003904
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003905SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
3906 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
3907 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
3908 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003909 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00003910 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00003911 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
3912 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003913
3914 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003915 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003916
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003917 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
3918
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003919 // Build up the table contents.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003920 SmallVector<Constant*, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
3921 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3922 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
3923 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003924 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003925
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003926 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue())
3927 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003928 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
3929
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003930 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003931 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003932 }
3933
3934 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003935 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00003936 assert(DefaultValue &&
3937 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003938 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003939 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
3940 if (!TableContents[I])
3941 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003942 }
3943
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003944 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003945 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003946 }
3947
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003948 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
3949 // that single value.
3950 if (SingleValue) {
3951 Kind = SingleValueKind;
3952 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003953 }
3954
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00003955 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
3956 // table index.
3957 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
3958 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
3959 APInt PrevVal;
3960 APInt DistToPrev;
3961 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
3962 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
3963 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
3964 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
3965 if (!ConstVal) {
3966 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
3967 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
3968 LinearMappingPossible = false;
3969 break;
3970 }
3971 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
3972 if (I != 0) {
3973 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
3974 if (I == 1) {
3975 DistToPrev = Dist;
3976 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
3977 LinearMappingPossible = false;
3978 break;
3979 }
3980 }
3981 PrevVal = Val;
3982 }
3983 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
3984 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
3985 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
3986 Kind = LinearMapKind;
3987 ++NumLinearMaps;
3988 return;
3989 }
3990 }
3991
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003992 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003993 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003994 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003995 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
3996 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
3997 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00003998 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
3999 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4000 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4001 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4002 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004003 }
4004 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4005 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4006 Kind = BitMapKind;
4007 ++NumBitMaps;
4008 return;
4009 }
4010
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004011 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004012 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004013 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4014
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004015 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/ true,
4016 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage,
4017 Initializer,
4018 "switch.table");
4019 Array->setUnnamedAddr(true);
4020 Kind = ArrayKind;
4021}
4022
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004023Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004024 switch (Kind) {
4025 case SingleValueKind:
4026 return SingleValue;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004027 case LinearMapKind: {
4028 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4029 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4030 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4031 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
4032 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
4033 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
4034 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
4035 return Result;
4036 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004037 case BitMapKind: {
4038 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
4039 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
4040
4041 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
4042 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
4043 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +00004044 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004045
4046 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
4047 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(ShiftAmt,
4048 ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
4049 "switch.shiftamt");
4050
4051 // Shift down.
4052 Value *DownShifted = Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt,
4053 "switch.downshift");
4054 // Mask off.
4055 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy,
4056 "switch.masked");
4057 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004058 case ArrayKind: {
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004059 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004060 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
4061 uint64_t TableSize = Array->getInitializer()->getType()
4062 ->getArrayNumElements();
4063 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
4064 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(Index,
4065 IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(),
4066 IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
4067 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004068
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004069 Value *GEPIndices[] = { Builder.getInt32(0), Index };
David Blaikieaa41cd52015-04-03 21:33:42 +00004070 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
4071 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004072 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
4073 }
4074 }
4075 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
4076}
4077
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004078bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004079 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00004080 Type *ElementType) {
4081 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004082 if (!IT)
4083 return false;
4084 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
4085 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004086
4087 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
4088 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX/IT->getBitWidth())
4089 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004090 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004091}
4092
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004093/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
4094/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004095static bool
4096ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
4097 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
4098 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004099 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
4100 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004101
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004102 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004103 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004104 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
4105 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004106
4107 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004108 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004109
4110 // Saturate this flag to false.
4111 AllTablesFitInRegister = AllTablesFitInRegister &&
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004112 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004113
4114 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
4115 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
4116 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
4117 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004118 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004119 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004120
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004121 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
4122 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
4123 return true;
4124
4125 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
4126 if (HasIllegalType)
4127 return false;
4128
4129 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
4130 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
4131 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
4132 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004133}
4134
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004135/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
4136/// \code
4137/// if (idx < tablesize)
4138/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
4139/// else
4140/// r = default_value;
4141/// if (r != default_value)
4142/// ...
4143/// \endcode
4144/// Is optimized to:
4145/// \code
4146/// cond = idx < tablesize;
4147/// if (cond)
4148/// r = table[idx];
4149/// else
4150/// r = default_value;
4151/// if (cond)
4152/// ...
4153/// \endcode
4154/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
4155static void reuseTableCompare(User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock,
4156 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch, Constant *DefaultValue,
4157 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*> >& Values) {
4158
4159 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
4160 if (!CmpInst)
4161 return;
4162
4163 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
4164 // threading can do its work afterwards.
4165 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
4166 return;
4167
4168 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
4169 if (!CmpOp1)
4170 return;
4171
4172 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
4173 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
4174 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
4175
4176 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
4177 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4178 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
4179 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
4180 return;
4181
4182 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
4183 // compare result.
4184 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
4185 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4186 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
4187 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
4188 return;
4189 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
4190 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
4191 }
4192
4193 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
4194 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
4195 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
4196 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
4197 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
4198 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
4199 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
4200 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
4201 return;
4202 }
4203
4204 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
4205 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
4206 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
4207 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4208 } else {
4209 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
4210 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(RangeCmp,
4211 ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
4212 RangeCheckBranch);
4213 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
4214 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4215 }
4216}
4217
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004218/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
4219/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
4220/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004221static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4222 const DataLayout &DL,
4223 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004224 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004225
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00004226 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004227 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004228 return false;
4229
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004230 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
4231 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
4232
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004233 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
4234 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
4235 // string and lookup indices into that.
4236
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00004237 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make them
4238 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
4239 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004240 return false;
4241
4242 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00004243 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004244 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
4245 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
4246 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4247 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4248
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004249 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004250 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*>, 4> ResultListTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004251 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
4252 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Constant*> DefaultResults;
4253 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*> ResultTypes;
4254 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
4255
4256 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
4257 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4258 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
4259 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
4260 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
4261 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
4262
4263 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4264 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> ResultsTy;
4265 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004266 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004267 Results, DL))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004268 return false;
4269
4270 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004271 for (const auto &I : Results) {
4272 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4273 Constant *Value = I.second;
4274 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
4275 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
4276 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004277 }
4278 }
4279
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004280 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004281 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004282 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
4283 }
4284
4285 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
4286 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
4287 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
4288 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
4289
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004290 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
4291 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004292 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004293 bool HasDefaultResults = GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(),
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004294 &CommonDest, DefaultResultsList, DL);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004295
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004296 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
4297 if (NeedMask) {
4298 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
4299 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
4300 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004301 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004302 return false;
4303 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004304
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004305 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
4306 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4307 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004308 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004309 }
4310
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004311 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004312 return false;
4313
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004314 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004315 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004316 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
4317 "switch.lookup",
4318 CommonDest->getParent(),
4319 CommonDest);
4320
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004321 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004322 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
4323 Value *TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
4324 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004325
4326 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
4327 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004328 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004329 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004330 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
4331 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
4332 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
4333
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004334 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
4335 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
4336 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
4337 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
4338 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4339 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004340 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
4341
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004342 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004343 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00004344 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
4345 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004346 } else {
4347 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004348 MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004349 RangeCheckBranch = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004350 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004351
4352 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
4353 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004354
4355 if (NeedMask) {
4356 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
4357 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
4358 // and we create a new LookupBB.
4359 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
4360 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
4361 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
4362 "switch.lookup",
4363 CommonDest->getParent(),
4364 CommonDest);
4365
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00004366 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
4367 // unnecessary illegal types.
4368 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
4369 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
4370 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004371 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004372 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
4373 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4374 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() -
4375 MinCaseVal->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
4376 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
4377 }
4378 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
4379
4380 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
4381 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
4382 // else continue with table lookup.
4383 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
4384 Value *MaskIndex = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy,
4385 "switch.maskindex");
4386 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex,
4387 "switch.shifted");
4388 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(Shifted,
4389 Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()),
4390 "switch.lobit");
4391 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
4392
4393 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
4394 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
4395 }
4396
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00004397 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
4398 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
4399 // do not delete PHINodes here.
4400 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
4401 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
4402 }
4403
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004404 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004405 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4406 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004407 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004408
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004409 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
4410 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004411 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004412
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004413 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004414
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004415 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
4416 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004417 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
4418 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004419 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
4420 ReturnedEarly = true;
4421 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004422 }
4423
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004424 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
4425 // possible.
4426 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
4427 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
4428 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
4429 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
4430 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
4431 }
4432 }
4433
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004434 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004435 }
4436
4437 if (!ReturnedEarly)
4438 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
4439
4440 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004441 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004442 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004443
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004444 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004445 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004446 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4447 }
4448 SI->eraseFromParent();
4449
4450 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004451 if (NeedMask)
4452 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004453 return true;
4454}
4455
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004456bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004457 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
4458
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004459 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
4460 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
4461 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
4462 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
4463 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004464 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00004465
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004466 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
4467 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
4468 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004469 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00004470
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004471 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
4472 // away into any preds.
4473 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
4474 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4475 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4476 ++BBI;
4477 if (SI == &*BBI)
4478 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004479 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004480 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004481
4482 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004483 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004484 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004485
4486 // Remove unreachable cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004487 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, AC, DL))
4488 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004489
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004490 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, AC, DL))
4491 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004492
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004493 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004494 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004495
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004496 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
4497 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004498
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004499 return false;
4500}
4501
4502bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
4503 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
4504 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004505
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004506 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
4507 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
4508 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
4509 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00004510 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004511 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
4512 IBI->removeDestination(i);
4513 --i; --e;
4514 Changed = true;
4515 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004516 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004517
4518 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
4519 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
4520 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
4521 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
4522 return true;
4523 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004524
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004525 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
4526 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
4527 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
4528 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
4529 return true;
4530 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004531
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004532 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
4533 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004534 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004535 }
4536 return Changed;
4537}
4538
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00004539/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
4540/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
4541/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
4542/// a shared handler.
4543///
4544/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
4545/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
4546/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
4547/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
4548/// sinking in this file)
4549///
4550/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
4551/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
4552/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
4553/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
4554/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
4555/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
4556///
4557/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
4558/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
4559/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
4560static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
4561 BasicBlock *BB) {
4562 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
4563 assert(Succ);
4564 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
4565 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
4566 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
4567 return false;
4568
4569 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
4570 if (BB == OtherPred)
4571 continue;
4572 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
4573 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
4574 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
4575 continue;
4576 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {}
4577 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
4578 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
4579 continue;
4580
4581 // We've found an identical block. Update our predeccessors to take that
4582 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
4583 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
4584 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
4585 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
4586 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
4587 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB &&
4588 II->getUnwindDest() == BB && "unexpected successor");
4589 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
4590 }
4591
4592 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
4593 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
4594 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end();
4595 I != E;) {
4596 Instruction &Inst = *I; I++;
4597 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
4598 Inst.eraseFromParent();
4599 }
4600
4601 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
4602 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
4603 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
4604 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
4605 }
4606
4607 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
4608 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
4609 BI->eraseFromParent();
4610 return true;
4611 }
4612 return false;
4613}
4614
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00004615bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder){
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004616 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004617
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00004618 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
4619 return true;
4620
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004621 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
Rafael Espindolad07cf402014-07-30 21:04:00 +00004622 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004623 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
4624 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
4625 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004626
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004627 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
4628 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
4629 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
4630 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
4631 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
4632 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00004633 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004634 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
4635 BonusInstThreshold, AC))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004636 return true;
4637 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004638
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00004639 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
4640 // equivalent.
4641 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
4642 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {}
4643 if (I->isTerminator() &&
4644 TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
4645 return true;
4646 }
4647
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00004648 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
4649 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
4650 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
4651 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004652 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
4653 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004654 return false;
4655}
4656
4657
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004658bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004659 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004660
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004661 // Conditional branch
4662 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
4663 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
4664 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
4665 // switch.
4666 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004667 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004668 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004669
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004670 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
4671 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4672 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
4673 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4674 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
4675 ++I;
4676 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00004677 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004678 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004679 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())){
4680 ++I;
4681 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4682 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
4683 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00004684 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004685 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004686 }
4687 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004688
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004689 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004690 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004691 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004692
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00004693 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
4694 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
4695 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004696 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
4697 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004698
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004699 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
4700 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
4701 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
4702 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004703 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
4704 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004705 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
4706 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004707 } else {
4708 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00004709 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004710 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
4711 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
4712 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004713 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
4714 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004715 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004716 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004717 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00004718 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004719 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
4720 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
4721 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004722 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
4723 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004724 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004725
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004726 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
4727 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
4728 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
4729 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004730 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004731 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004732
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004733 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004734 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
4735 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004736 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
4737 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004738 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004739
4740 return false;
4741}
4742
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004743/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
4744static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
4745 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
4746 if (!C)
4747 return false;
4748
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00004749 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004750 return false;
4751
4752 if (C->isNullValue()) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00004753 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004754 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004755
4756 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
4757 // control flow (eg. calls)
4758 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I); &*i != Use; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00004759 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004760 return false;
4761
4762 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
4763 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
4764 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
4765 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
4766
4767 // Look through bitcasts.
4768 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
4769 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
4770
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00004771 // Load from null is undefined.
4772 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00004773 if (!LI->isVolatile())
4774 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004775
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00004776 // Store to null is undefined.
4777 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00004778 if (!SI->isVolatile())
4779 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 && SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004780 }
4781 return false;
4782}
4783
4784/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00004785/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004786static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
4787 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
4788 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
4789 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
4790 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
4791 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
4792 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
4793 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
4794 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
4795 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
4796 // destination from conditional branches.
4797 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4798 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
4799 else
4800 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1) :
4801 BI->getSuccessor(0));
4802 BI->eraseFromParent();
4803 return true;
4804 }
4805 // TODO: SwitchInst.
4806 }
4807
4808 return false;
4809}
4810
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00004811bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00004812 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004813
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004814 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004815 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004816
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00004817 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
4818 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Ramkumar Ramachandra181233b2015-01-13 04:17:47 +00004819 if ((pred_empty(BB) &&
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004820 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00004821 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00004822 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
Chris Lattner7eb270e2008-12-03 06:40:52 +00004823 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004824 return true;
4825 }
4826
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00004827 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
4828 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00004829 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00004830
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00004831 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
4832 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
4833
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004834 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
4835 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
4836
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00004837 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
4838 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
4839 // if there are no PHI nodes.
4840 //
4841 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
4842 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004843
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00004844 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
4845
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00004846 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
4847 // eliminate it, do so now.
4848 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
4849 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004850 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00004851
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004852 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004853 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004854 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00004855 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004856 } else {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004857 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004858 }
4859 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004860 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder)) return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00004861 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
4862 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder)) return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00004863 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
4864 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
4865 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004866 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004867 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004868 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
4869 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
4870 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004871 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
4872 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
4873 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI)) return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00004874 }
4875
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00004876 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004877}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00004878
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004879/// This function is used to do simplification of a CFG.
4880/// For example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop,
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00004881/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
4882/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
4883///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004884bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004885 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC) {
4886 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
4887 BonusInstThreshold, AC).run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00004888}